blob: ccb7e1cc2abc7dbbf1fb007ce78afc8fc61ff951 [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau79158882009-06-09 11:59:08 +02005 version 1.4
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreau6939b552010-01-25 01:54:37 +01007 2010/01/25
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
45
464. Proxies
474.1. Proxy keywords matrix
484.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
49
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100505. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020051
526. HTTP header manipulation
53
547. Using ACLs
557.1. Matching integers
567.2. Matching strings
577.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
587.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
597.5. Available matching criteria
607.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
617.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
627.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
637.6. Pre-defined ACLs
647.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
65
668. Logging
678.1. Log levels
688.2. Log formats
698.2.1. Default log format
708.2.2. TCP log format
718.2.3. HTTP log format
728.3. Advanced logging options
738.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
748.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
758.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
768.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
778.4. Timing events
788.5. Session state at disconnection
798.6. Non-printable characters
808.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
818.8. Capturing HTTP headers
828.9. Examples of logs
83
849. Statistics and monitoring
859.1. CSV format
869.2. Unix Socket commands
87
88
891. Quick reminder about HTTP
90----------------------------
91
92When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
93fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
94on almost anything found in the contents.
95
96However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
97formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
98correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
99
100
1011.1. The HTTP transaction model
102-------------------------------
103
104The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100105to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200106from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
107connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
108will involve a new connection :
109
110 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
111
112In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
113establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
114by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
115length.
116
117Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
118to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
119however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
120response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
121header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
122
123 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
124
125Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
126power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
127but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
128a smaller value. HAProxy currently does not support the HTTP keep-alive mode,
129but knows how to transform it to the close mode.
130
131A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
132keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
133second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
134page :
135
136 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
137
138This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
139latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
140correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
141the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
142server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
143
144Right now, HAProxy only supports the first mode (HTTP close) if it needs to
145process the request. This means that for each request, there will be one TCP
146connection. If keep-alive or pipelining are required, HAProxy will still
147support them, but will only see the first request and the first response of
148each transaction. While this is generally problematic with regards to logs,
149content switching or filtering, it most often causes no problem for persistence
150with cookie insertion.
151
152
1531.2. HTTP request
154-----------------
155
156First, let's consider this HTTP request :
157
158 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100159 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200160 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
161 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
162 3 User-agent: my small browser
163 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
164 5 Accept: image/png
165
166
1671.2.1. The Request line
168-----------------------
169
170Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
171
172 - a METHOD : GET
173 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
174 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
175
176All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
177which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
178followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
179is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
180desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
181the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
182
183The URI itself can have several forms :
184
185 - A "relative URI" :
186
187 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
188
189 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
190 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
191
192 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
193
194 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
195
196 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
197 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
198 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
199 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
200 must accept this form too.
201
202 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
203 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
204 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100205
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200206 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
207 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
208 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
209 other protocols too.
210
211In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
212mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
213on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
214It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
215specific to the language, framework or application in use.
216
217
2181.2.2. The request headers
219--------------------------
220
221The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
222beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
223an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
224Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
225values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
226encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
227the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
228define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
229
230Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
231their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
232"Connection:" header).
233
234The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
235that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
236is one valid form of empty line.
237
238Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
239headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
240about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
241application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
242
243Important note:
244 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
245 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
246 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
247 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
248
249
2501.3. HTTP response
251------------------
252
253An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
254messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
255
256 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100257 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200258 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
259 2 Content-length: 350
260 3 Content-Type: text/html
261
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200262As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
263codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
264response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
265continue to post its request for instance. The requested information will be
266carried by the next non-1xx response message following the informational one.
267This implies that multiple responses may be sent to a single request, and that
268this only works when keep-alive is enabled (1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only).
269HAProxy handles these messages and is able to correctly forward and skip them,
270and only process the next non-1xx response. As such, these messages are neither
271logged nor transformed, unless explicitly state otherwise.
272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100388
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100402 - tune.rcvbuf.client
403 - tune.rcvbuf.server
404 - tune.sndbuf.client
405 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100406
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200407 * Debugging
408 - debug
409 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200410
411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004123.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413------------------------------------
414
415chroot <jail dir>
416 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
417 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
418 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
419 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
420 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
421 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100422
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200423daemon
424 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
425 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
426 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
427
428gid <number>
429 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
430 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
431 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
432 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100433
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200434group <group name>
435 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
436 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200438log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
440 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100441 configured with "log global".
442
443 <address> can be one of:
444
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100445 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
447 port).
448
449 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
450 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
451 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
452 writeable).
453
454 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200455
456 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
457 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
458 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
459
460 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200461 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
462 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
463 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
464 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
465 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
466 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200467
468 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
469
470nbproc <number>
471 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
472 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
473 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
474 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
475 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
476
477pidfile <pidfile>
478 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
479 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
480 starting the process. See also "daemon".
481
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200482stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200483 [level <level>]
484
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200485 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
486 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100487 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
489
490 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
491 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
492 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
493 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
494 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
495
496 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
497 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
498 counters).
499
500 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
501 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100502
503 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
504 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
505 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
506 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
507 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
508 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
509 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200510
511stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
512 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
513 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100514 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats maxconn <connections>
517 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
518 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
519
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200520uid <number>
521 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
522 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
523 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
524 one. See also "gid" and "user".
525
526ulimit-n <number>
527 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
528 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
529 option.
530
531user <user name>
532 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
533 See also "uid" and "group".
534
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200535node <name>
536 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
537
538 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
539 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
540 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
541 traffic.
542
543description <text>
544 Add a text that describes the instance.
545
546 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
547 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
548 "<" and ">" characters.
549
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200552-----------------------
553
554maxconn <number>
555 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
556 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
557 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
558 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
559
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100560maxpipes <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
562 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
563 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
564 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
565 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
566 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
567
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200568noepoll
569 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
570 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
571 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
572
573nokqueue
574 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
577
578nopoll
579 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
580 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100581 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200582 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
583 "nokqueue".
584
585nosepoll
586 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
587 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
588 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
589
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100590nosplice
591 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
592 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
593 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100594 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
596 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
597 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
598 "option splice-response".
599
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200600spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
601 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
602 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
603 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
604 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
605 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
606
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200607tune.bufsize <number>
608 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
609 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
610 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
611 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
612 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
613 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
614 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
615 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
616
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100617tune.maxaccept <number>
618 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
619 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
620 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100621 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
623 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100624 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100625 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
626
627tune.maxpollevents <number>
628 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
629 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
630 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
631 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
632 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
633
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200634tune.maxrewrite <number>
635 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
636 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
637 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
638 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
639 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
640 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
641 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
642 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
643 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
644 bufsize.
645
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100646tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
647tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
648 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
649 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
650 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
651 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
652 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
653 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
654 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
655
656tune.sndbuf.client <number>
657tune.sndbuf.server <number>
658 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
659 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
660 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
661 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
662 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
663 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
664 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
665 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
666 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
667 notifying haproxy again.
668
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200669
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006703.3. Debugging
671--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200672
673debug
674 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
675 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
676 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
677 system startup.
678
679quiet
680 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
681 line argument "-q".
682
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200683
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006844. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200685----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100686
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200687Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
688 - defaults <name>
689 - frontend <name>
690 - backend <name>
691 - listen <name>
692
693A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
694its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
695section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100696section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200697
698A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
699connections.
700
701A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
702to forward incoming connections.
703
704A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
705parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
706
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100707All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
708'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
709case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
710
711Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
712logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
713proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
714However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
715name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
716
717Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
718and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100719bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100720protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
721modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
722arbitrary criteria.
723
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100724
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007254.1. Proxy keywords matrix
726--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100727
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200728The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
729limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
730they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
731limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200732listed with [no] can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200733option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200734and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
735with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
736specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100737
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200738
739keyword defaults frontend listen backend
740----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100741acl - X X X
742appsession - - X X
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +0100743backlog X X X -
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100744balance X - X X
745bind - X X -
746bind-process X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200747block - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100748capture cookie - X X -
749capture request header - X X -
750capture response header - X X -
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100751clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100752contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200753cookie X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +0100754default-server X - X X
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +0100755default_backend X X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200756description - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100757disabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200758dispatch - - X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100759enabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200760errorfile X X X X
761errorloc X X X X
762errorloc302 X X X X
763errorloc303 X X X X
764fullconn X - X X
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +0100765grace X X X X
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +0200766hash-type X - X X
Willy Tarreaudbc36f62007-11-30 12:29:11 +0100767http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +0200768id - X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200769log X X X X
770maxconn X X X -
771mode X X X X
Willy Tarreauc7246fc2007-12-02 17:31:20 +0100772monitor fail - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200773monitor-net X X X -
774monitor-uri X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100775[no] option abortonclose X - X X
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +0200776[no] option accept-invalid-
777 http-request X X X -
778[no] option accept-invalid-
779 http-response X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100780[no] option allbackups X - X X
781[no] option checkcache X - X X
782[no] option clitcpka X X X -
783[no] option contstats X X X -
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +0200784[no] option dontlog-normal X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100785[no] option dontlognull X X X -
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +0100786[no] option forceclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200787option forwardfor X X X X
788option httpchk X - X X
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +0100789[no] option http-server-
790 close X X X X
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +0100791[no] option http-use-proxy-
792 header X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100793[no] option httpclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200794option httplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200795[no] option http_proxy X X X X
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +0200796[no] option independant-
797 streams X X X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki213014e2009-09-27 15:50:02 +0200798[no] option log-health- X - X X
799 checks
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +0200800[no] option log-separate-
801 errors X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100802[no] option logasap X X X -
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +0100803option mysql-check X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100804[no] option nolinger X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200805option originalto X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100806[no] option persist X - X X
807[no] option redispatch X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200808option smtpchk X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +0200809[no] option socket-stats X X X -
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100810[no] option splice-auto X X X X
811[no] option splice-request X X X X
812[no] option splice-response X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100813[no] option srvtcpka X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200814option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +0200815[no] option tcp-smart-
816 accept X X X -
Willy Tarreau39bb9be2009-10-17 16:04:09 +0200817[no] option tcp-smart-
818 connect X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200819option tcpka X X X X
820option tcplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100821[no] option transparent X - X X
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +0200822persist rdp-cookie X - X X
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +0100823rate-limit sessions X X X -
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +0200824redirect - X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100825redisp X - X X (deprecated)
826redispatch X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200827reqadd - X X X
828reqallow - X X X
829reqdel - X X X
830reqdeny - X X X
831reqiallow - X X X
832reqidel - X X X
833reqideny - X X X
834reqipass - X X X
835reqirep - X X X
836reqisetbe - X X X
837reqitarpit - X X X
838reqpass - X X X
839reqrep - X X X
840reqsetbe - X X X
841reqtarpit - X X X
842retries X - X X
843rspadd - X X X
844rspdel - X X X
845rspdeny - X X X
846rspidel - X X X
847rspideny - X X X
848rspirep - X X X
849rsprep - X X X
850server - - X X
851source X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100852srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200853stats auth X - X X
854stats enable X - X X
855stats realm X - X X
Willy Tarreaubbd42122007-07-25 07:26:38 +0200856stats refresh X - X X
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200857stats scope X - X X
858stats uri X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzkid9db9272007-10-15 10:05:11 +0200859stats hide-version X - X X
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +0200860tcp-request content accept - X X -
861tcp-request content reject - X X -
862tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +0100863timeout check X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100864timeout client X X X -
865timeout clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
866timeout connect X - X X
867timeout contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +0100868timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +0200869timeout http-request X X X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100870timeout queue X - X X
871timeout server X - X X
872timeout srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau51c9bde2008-01-06 13:40:03 +0100873timeout tarpit X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100874transparent X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200875use_backend - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200876----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
877keyword defaults frontend listen backend
878
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100879
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02008804.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
881---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100882
883This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
884
885
886acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
887 Declare or complete an access list.
888 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
889 no | yes | yes | yes
890 Example:
891 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
892 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
893 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
894
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200895 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100896
897
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100898appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
899 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100900 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
901 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
902 no | no | yes | yes
903 Arguments :
904 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
905 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
906
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100907 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100908 checked in each cookie value.
909
910 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
911 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
912 milliseconds.
913
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200914 request-learn
915 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
916 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
917 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
918 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
919 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
920 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
921
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100922 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
923 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
924 data following this prefix.
925
926 Example :
927 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
928
929 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
930 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
931
932 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
933 2 modes are currently supported :
934 - path-parameters :
935 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
936 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
937 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
938 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
939 - query-string :
940 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
941 query string.
942
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100943 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
944 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
945 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
946 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100947 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
948 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
949 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100950 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
951 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
952
953 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
954
955 Example :
956 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
957
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +0100958 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick" and "stick-table".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100959
960
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +0100961backlog <conns>
962 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
963 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
964 yes | yes | yes | no
965 Arguments :
966 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
967 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
968 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
969
970 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
971 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
972 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
973 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
974 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
975 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
976 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
977 backlog parameter.
978
979 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
980 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
981 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
982
983 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
984
985
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100986balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +0200987balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100988 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
989 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
990 yes | no | yes | yes
991 Arguments :
992 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
993 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
994 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
995 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
996
997 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
998 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
999 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1000 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001001 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1002 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1003 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1004 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1005 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1006 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1007 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1008 it, so that you don't worry.
1009
1010 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1011 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1012 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1013 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1014 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1015 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1016 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1017 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001018
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001019 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1020 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1021 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1022 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1023 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1024 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1025 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1026 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1027
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001028 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1029 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1030 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1031 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1032 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1033 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1034 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1035 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001036 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001037 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001038 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1039 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1040 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001041
1042 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1043 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1044 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1045 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1046 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1047 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1048 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001049 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1050 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1051 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001052
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001053 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1054 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1055 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1056 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1057 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1058 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1059 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1060 URIs start with a leading "/".
1061
1062 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1063 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1064 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1065 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1066
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001067 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001068 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1069
1070 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1071 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1072 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1073 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1074 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1075 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1076 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1077 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1078 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1079 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1080 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1081 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1082 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1083 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1084 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1085 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1086 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1087 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1088 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1089 be randomly balanced if at all.
1090
1091 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1092 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1093 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1094 server will receive the request.
1095
1096 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1097 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1098 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1099 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1100 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001101 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1102 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1103 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001104
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001105 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1106 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1107 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001108 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001109 algorithm is applied instead.
1110
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001111 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001112 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1113 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1114 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1115
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001116 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1117 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1118 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1119
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001120 rdp-cookie
1121 rdp-cookie(name)
1122 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1123 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1124 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1125 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1126 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1127 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001128 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001129 used instead.
1130
1131 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1132 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1133 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1134 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1135
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001136 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1137 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1138 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1139
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001140 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001141 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1142 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001143
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001144 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001145 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001146
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001147 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1148 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1149 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001150
1151 Examples :
1152 balance roundrobin
1153 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001154 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001155 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1156 balance hdr(host)
1157 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001158
1159 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1160 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1161
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001162 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001163 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1164 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1165 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1166 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1167
1168 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1169 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1170 defaults to 16 kB.
1171
1172 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1173 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1174
1175 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1176 Round Robin.
1177
1178 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1179 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1180 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1181 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1182
1183 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1184
1185 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001186 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001187 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1188 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1189 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001190
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001191 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1192 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001193
1194
1195bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...]
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001196bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] interface <interface>
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001197bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001198bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] transparent
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001199bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] id <id>
1200bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] name <name>
Willy Tarreau53319c92009-11-28 08:21:29 +01001201bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001202 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1203 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1204 no | yes | yes | no
1205 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001206 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1207 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1208 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1209 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1210 special address "0.0.0.0".
1211
1212 <port> is the TCP port number the proxy will listen on. The port is
1213 mandatory. Note that in the case of an IPv6 address, the port
1214 is always the number after the last colon (':').
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001215
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001216 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1217 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1218 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1219 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1220 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1221 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1222 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1223 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1224 privileges.
1225
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001226 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1227 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1228 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1229 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1230 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1231 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1232 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1233 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1234
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001235 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1236 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1237 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1238 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001239
1240 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1241
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001242 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1243 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1244 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001245 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001246 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1247 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1248 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1249 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1250 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001251
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001252 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1253 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1254 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1255 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1256 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1257 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1258 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1259 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1260 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1261 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1262 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1263 with front firewalls which would see an established
1264 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1265
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001266 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1267 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1268 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1269 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1270 in a frontend.
1271
1272 Example :
1273 listen http_proxy
1274 bind :80,:443
1275 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1276
1277 See also : "source".
1278
1279
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001280bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1281 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1282 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1283 yes | yes | yes | yes
1284 Arguments :
1285 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1286 may be used to override a default value.
1287
1288 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1289 option may be combined with other numbers.
1290
1291 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1292 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1293 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1294 missing from all processes.
1295
1296 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1297 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1298 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1299 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1300
1301 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1302 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1303 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1304 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1305 and 'even' instances.
1306
1307 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1308 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1309 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1310 32.
1311
1312 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1313 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1314
1315 Example :
1316 listen app_ip1
1317 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1318 bind_process odd
1319
1320 listen app_ip2
1321 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1322 bind_process even
1323
1324 listen management
1325 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1326 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1327
1328 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1329
1330
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001331block { if | unless } <condition>
1332 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1333 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1334 no | yes | yes | yes
1335
1336 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1337 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001338 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001339 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1340 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1341 "block" statements per instance.
1342
1343 Example:
1344 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1345 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1346 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1347 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1348
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001349 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001350
1351
1352capture cookie <name> len <length>
1353 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1354 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1355 no | yes | yes | no
1356 Arguments :
1357 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1358 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1359 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1360 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1361 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1362
1363 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1364 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1365 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1366 right if it exceeds <length>.
1367
1368 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1369 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1370 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1371 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1372
1373 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1374 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1375 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1376
1377 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1378 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1379 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1380 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001381 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001382 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1383
1384 Example:
1385 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1386
1387 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001388 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001389
1390
1391capture request header <name> len <length>
1392 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1393 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1394 no | yes | yes | no
1395 Arguments :
1396 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001397 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001398 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1399 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1400 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1401
1402 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1403 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1404 it exceeds <length>.
1405
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001406 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001407 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1408 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001409 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1410 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1411 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1412 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001413 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001414 environments to find where the request came from.
1415
1416 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1417 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1418 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1419 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001420
1421 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1422 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1423 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1424 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1425
1426 Example:
1427 capture request header Host len 15
1428 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1429 capture request header Referrer len 15
1430
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001431 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001432 about logging.
1433
1434
1435capture response header <name> len <length>
1436 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1437 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1438 no | yes | yes | no
1439 Arguments :
1440 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001441 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001442 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1443 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1444 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1445
1446 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1447 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1448 it exceeds <length>.
1449
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001450 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001451 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1452 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1453 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001454 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1455 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1456 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1457 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001458
1459 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1460 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1461 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1462 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1463
1464 Example:
1465 capture response header Content-length len 9
1466 capture response header Location len 15
1467
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001468 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001469 about logging.
1470
1471
1472clitimeout <timeout>
1473 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1474 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1475 yes | yes | yes | no
1476 Arguments :
1477 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1478 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1479 as explained at the top of this document.
1480
1481 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1482 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1483 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1484 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1485 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1486 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1487 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1488 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001489 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001490 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1491 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1492
1493 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1494 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1495 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1496 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1497 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1498 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1499
1500 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1501 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1502
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001503 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1504 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001505
1506
1507contimeout <timeout>
1508 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1509 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1510 yes | no | yes | yes
1511 Arguments :
1512 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1513 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1514 as explained at the top of this document.
1515
1516 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001517 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001518 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001519 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1520 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1521 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1522 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1523
1524 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1525 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1526 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1527 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1528 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1529 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1530
1531 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1532 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1533 instead.
1534
1535 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1536 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1537
1538
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001539cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001540 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001541 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1542 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1543 yes | no | yes | yes
1544 Arguments :
1545 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1546 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1547 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1548 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1549 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1550 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1551 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1552 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1553 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1554
1555 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1556 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1557 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1558 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1559 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1560 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1561 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1562 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1563 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1564 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1565 "insert" and "prefix".
1566
1567 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1568 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1569 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1570 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1571 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1572 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1573 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1574 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1575 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1576
1577 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1578 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1579 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1580 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1581 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1582 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1583 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1584 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1585 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1586 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1587 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1588
1589 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1590 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1591 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1592 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1593 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1594 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1595 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1596 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1597 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1598 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1599
1600 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1601 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1602 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1603 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1604 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1605 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1606 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1607 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1608 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1609
1610 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1611 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1612 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1613 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1614 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1615 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1616 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1617 persistence cookie in the cache.
1618 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1619
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001620 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001621 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001622 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1623 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1624 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1625 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1626 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1627 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001628
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001629 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1630 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1631 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1632 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001633
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001634 Examples :
1635 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1636 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1637 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1638
1639 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1640
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001641
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001642default-server [param*]
1643 Change default options for a server in a backend
1644 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1645 yes | no | yes | yes
1646 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001647 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1648 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1649 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1650 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001651
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001652 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001653 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1654
1655 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001656
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001657
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001658default_backend <backend>
1659 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1660 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1661 yes | yes | yes | no
1662 Arguments :
1663 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1664
1665 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1666 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1667 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1668 will catch all undetermined requests.
1669
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001670 Example :
1671
1672 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1673 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1674 default_backend dynamic
1675
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001676 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1677
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001678
1679disabled
1680 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1681 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1682 yes | yes | yes | yes
1683 Arguments : none
1684
1685 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1686 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1687 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1688 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1689 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1690 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1691 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1692
1693 See also : "enabled"
1694
1695
1696enabled
1697 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1698 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1699 yes | yes | yes | yes
1700 Arguments : none
1701
1702 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1703 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1704
1705 See also : "disabled"
1706
1707
1708errorfile <code> <file>
1709 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1710 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1711 yes | yes | yes | yes
1712 Arguments :
1713 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1714 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1715
1716 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001717 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001718 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001719 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1720 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001721
1722 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1723 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1724 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1725
1726 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1727 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1728 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1729 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1730
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001731 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1732 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1733 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1734 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1735 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1736 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1737
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001738 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1739 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1740 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001741 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001742 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1743
1744 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1745
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001746 Example :
1747 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1748 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1749 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1750
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001751
1752errorloc <code> <url>
1753errorloc302 <code> <url>
1754 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1755 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1756 yes | yes | yes | yes
1757 Arguments :
1758 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1759 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1760
1761 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1762 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1763 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1764 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1765 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1766
1767 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1768 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1769 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1770
1771 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1772 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1773 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1774 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1775 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1776 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1777 request.
1778
1779 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1780
1781
1782errorloc303 <code> <url>
1783 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1784 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1785 yes | yes | yes | yes
1786 Arguments :
1787 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1788 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1789
1790 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1791 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1792 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1793 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1794 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1795
1796 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1797 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1798 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1799
1800 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1801 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1802 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1803 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001804 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001805
1806 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1807
1808
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001809force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1810 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1811 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1812 no | yes | yes | yes
1813
1814 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1815 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1816 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1817 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1818 marked down for maintenance operations.
1819
1820 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1821 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1822 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1823 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1824 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1825 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1826 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1827 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1828 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1829
1830 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1831 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1832 is used.
1833
1834 See also : "option redispatch", "persist", and section 7 about ACL usage.
1835
1836
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001837fullconn <conns>
1838 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1839 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1840 yes | no | yes | yes
1841 Arguments :
1842 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1843 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1844
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001845 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001846 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001847 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001848 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1849 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1850 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1851 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1852 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001853 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001854
1855 Example :
1856 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1857 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1858 # connections.
1859 backend dynamic
1860 fullconn 10000
1861 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1862 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1863
1864 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1865
1866
1867grace <time>
1868 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1869 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001870 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001871 Arguments :
1872 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1873 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1874 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1875
1876 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1877 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001878 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001879 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1880
1881 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1882 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1883 simplify it.
1884
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001885
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001886hash-type <method>
1887 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1888 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1889 yes | no | yes | yes
1890 Arguments :
1891 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1892 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1893 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1894 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1895 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1896 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1897 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1898 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1899 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1900
1901 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1902 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1903 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1904 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1905 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1906 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1907 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1908 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1909 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1910 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1911 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1912 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1913 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1914
1915 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1916
1917 See also : "balance", "server"
1918
1919
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001920http-check disable-on-404
1921 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1922 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001923 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001924 Arguments : none
1925
1926 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1927 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1928 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1929 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1930 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1931 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1932 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1933 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1934 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1935
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001936 See also : "option httpchk"
1937
1938
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01001939http-check send-state
1940 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
1941 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1942 yes | no | yes | yes
1943 Arguments : none
1944
1945 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
1946 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
1947 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
1948 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
1949 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
1950
1951 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
1952 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
1953 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
1954 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
1955 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
1956 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
1957 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
1958 checked in multiple backends.
1959
1960 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
1961 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
1962
1963 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
1964 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
1965 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
1966 one fails.
1967
1968 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
1969 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
1970 connections on all servers of the same backend.
1971
1972 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
1973 server's queue.
1974
1975 Example of a header received by the application server :
1976 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
1977 scur=13/22; qcur=0
1978
1979 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
1980
1981
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01001982id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001983 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
1984 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1985 no | yes | yes | yes
1986 Arguments : none
1987
1988 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
1989 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
1990 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01001991
1992
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001993log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02001994log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001995 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
1996 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1997 yes | yes | yes | yes
1998 Arguments :
1999 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2000 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2001 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2002 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2003 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2004 parameter.
2005
2006 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2007 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2008
2009 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2010 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2011 standard syslog port).
2012
2013 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2014 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2015 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2016 appropriately writeable).
2017
2018 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2019
2020 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2021 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2022 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2023
2024 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2025 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2026 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002027 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2028 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2029 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2030 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2031 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002032
2033 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2034
2035 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2036 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2037 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2038
2039 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002040 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2041 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2042 "info".
2043
2044 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2045 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2046 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2047 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2048
2049 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2050 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002051
2052 Example :
2053 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002054 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2055 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002056
2057
2058maxconn <conns>
2059 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2060 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2061 yes | yes | yes | no
2062 Arguments :
2063 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2064 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2065 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2066 closes.
2067
2068 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2069 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2070 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2071 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2072 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2073 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2074 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2075 properly tuned.
2076
2077 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2078 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2079 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2080
2081 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2082
2083
2084mode { tcp|http|health }
2085 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2086 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2087 yes | yes | yes | yes
2088 Arguments :
2089 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2090 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2091 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2092 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2093
2094 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2095 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2096 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2097 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2098 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2099
2100 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2101 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2102 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2103 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2104 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2105 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2106
2107 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2108 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2109 will be refused.
2110
2111 Example :
2112 defaults http_instances
2113 mode http
2114
2115 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2116
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002117
2118monitor fail [if | unless] <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002119 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002120 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2121 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002122 Arguments :
2123 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2124 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002125 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002126 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2127 backend and its backup.
2128
2129 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2130 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2131 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2132 servers in a list of backends.
2133
2134 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2135 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2136 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2137 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2138 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2139 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2140 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002141 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002142
2143 Example:
2144 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002145 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002146 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2147 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2148 monitor-uri /site_alive
2149 monitor fail if site_dead
2150
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002151 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2152
2153
2154monitor-net <source>
2155 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2156 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2157 yes | yes | yes | no
2158 Arguments :
2159 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2160 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2161 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2162 followed by a mask.
2163
2164 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2165 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002166 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002167 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2168
2169 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2170 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2171 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2172 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2173 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2174
2175 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2176 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2177 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2178 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2179 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2180
2181 Example :
2182 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2183 frontend www
2184 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2185
2186 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2187
2188
2189monitor-uri <uri>
2190 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2191 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2192 yes | yes | yes | no
2193 Arguments :
2194 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2195 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2196
2197 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2198 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2199 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2200 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2201 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2202 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2203 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2204 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2205
2206 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2207 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2208 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2209 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2210 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2211 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2212
2213 Example :
2214 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2215 frontend www
2216 mode http
2217 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2218
2219 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2220
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002221
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002222option abortonclose
2223no option abortonclose
2224 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2225 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2226 yes | no | yes | yes
2227 Arguments : none
2228
2229 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2230 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2231 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2232 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002233 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002234 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2235 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2236 encountered while delivering the response.
2237
2238 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2239 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2240 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2241 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2242 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2243 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002244 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002245 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002246 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002247 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2248 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2249 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2250
2251 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2252 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2253 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2254 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2255 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2256 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2257 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2258 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002259 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002260
2261 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2262 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2263
2264 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2265
2266
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002267option accept-invalid-http-request
2268no option accept-invalid-http-request
2269 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2270 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2271 yes | yes | yes | no
2272 Arguments : none
2273
2274 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2275 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2276 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2277 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2278 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2279 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2280 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2281 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2282 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2283
2284 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2285 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2286 been confirmed.
2287
2288 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2289 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2290 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2291 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2292
2293 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2294 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2295
2296 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2297 stats socket.
2298
2299
2300option accept-invalid-http-response
2301no option accept-invalid-http-response
2302 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2303 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2304 yes | no | yes | yes
2305 Arguments : none
2306
2307 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2308 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2309 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2310 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2311 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2312 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2313 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2314 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2315 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2316
2317 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2318 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2319 been confirmed.
2320
2321 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2322 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2323 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2324 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2325
2326 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2327 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2328
2329 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2330 stats socket.
2331
2332
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002333option allbackups
2334no option allbackups
2335 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2336 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2337 yes | no | yes | yes
2338 Arguments : none
2339
2340 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2341 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2342 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2343 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2344 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2345 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2346 order between the backup servers anymore.
2347
2348 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2349 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2350
2351 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2352 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2353
2354
2355option checkcache
2356no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002357 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002358 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2359 yes | no | yes | yes
2360 Arguments : none
2361
2362 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2363 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002364 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002365 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2366 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2367 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2368
2369 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002370 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002371 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002372 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2373 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002374 to the client are :
2375 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002376 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002377 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002378 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2379 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2380 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2381 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2382 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2383 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2384 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2385 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2386 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2387 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2388 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2389
2390 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002391 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002392 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002393 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002394 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2395
2396 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2397 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002398 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002399 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2400
2401 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2402 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2403
2404
2405option clitcpka
2406no option clitcpka
2407 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2408 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2409 yes | yes | yes | no
2410 Arguments : none
2411
2412 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2413 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2414 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2415 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2416
2417 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2418 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2419 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2420 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2421
2422 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2423 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2424 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2425 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2426 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2427
2428 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2429
2430 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2431 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2432 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2433
2434 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2435 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2436
2437 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2438
2439
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002440option contstats
2441 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2442 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2443 yes | yes | yes | no
2444 Arguments : none
2445
2446 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2447 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2448 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2449 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2450 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2451 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2452 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2453
2454
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002455option dontlog-normal
2456no option dontlog-normal
2457 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2458 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2459 yes | yes | yes | no
2460 Arguments : none
2461
2462 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2463 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2464 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2465 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2466 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2467 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2468 logged.
2469
2470 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2471 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2472 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2473
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002474 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002475 logging.
2476
2477
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002478option dontlognull
2479no option dontlognull
2480 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2481 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2482 yes | yes | yes | no
2483 Arguments : none
2484
2485 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2486 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2487 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2488 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2489 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2490 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2491 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2492
2493 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2494 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2495 would not be logged.
2496
2497 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2498 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2499
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002500 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002501
2502
2503option forceclose
2504no option forceclose
2505 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2506 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002507 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002508 Arguments : none
2509
2510 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2511 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2512 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2513 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2514 global session times in the logs.
2515
2516 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002517 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002518 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2519 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2520 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2521 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002522
2523 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2524 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2525
2526 See also : "option httpclose"
2527
2528
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002529option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002530 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2531 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2532 yes | yes | yes | yes
2533 Arguments :
2534 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2535 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002536 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002537 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002538
2539 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2540 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2541 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2542 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2543 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2544 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2545 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002546 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2547 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2548 possible that the client has already brought one.
2549
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002550 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002551 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002552 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2553 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002554 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2555 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002556
2557 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2558 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2559 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2560 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2561 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2562 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2563 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2564
2565 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002566 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2567 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2568 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002569
2570 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2571 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2572 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2573 when using this option.
2574
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002575 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002576 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2577 frontend www
2578 mode http
2579 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2580
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002581 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2582 backend www
2583 mode http
2584 option forwardfor header X-Client
2585
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002586 See also : "option httpclose"
2587
2588
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002589option httpchk
2590option httpchk <uri>
2591option httpchk <method> <uri>
2592option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2593 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2594 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2595 yes | no | yes | yes
2596 Arguments :
2597 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2598 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2599 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2600 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2601 ones.
2602
2603 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2604 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2605 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2606
2607 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2608 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2609 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2610 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2611 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2612
2613 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2614 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2615 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2616 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2617 the lack of any response.
2618
2619 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2620
2621 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2622 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2623 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2624
2625 Examples :
2626 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2627 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2628 backend https_relay
2629 mode tcp
Willy Tarreauebaf21a2008-03-21 20:17:14 +01002630 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002631 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2632
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002633 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2634 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "interval" server options.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002635
2636
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002637option http-server-close
2638no option http-server-close
2639 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2640 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2641 yes | yes | yes | yes
2642 Arguments : none
2643
2644 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2645 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2646 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2647 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2648 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2649 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
2650 of RFC2616.
2651
2652 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2653 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2654 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2655 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002656 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2657 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002658
2659 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2660 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002661 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2662 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2663 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002664
2665 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2666 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2667
2668 See also : "option forceclose" and "option httpclose"
2669
2670
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002671option http-use-proxy-header
2672[no] option http-use-proxy-header
2673 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2674 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2675 yes | yes | yes | no
2676 Arguments : none
2677
2678 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2679 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2680 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2681 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2682 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2683 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2684 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2685
2686 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2687 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2688 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2689 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2690 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2691 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2692 request along its whole life.
2693
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002694 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2695 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2696 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2697 front of an existing proxy.
2698
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002699 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2700
2701 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2702 http-server-close".
2703
2704
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002705option httpclose
2706no option httpclose
2707 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2708 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2709 yes | yes | yes | yes
2710 Arguments : none
2711
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002712 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002713 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2714 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2715 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2716 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2717 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2718 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2719 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2720 be removed.
2721
2722 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002723 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2724 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2725 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2726 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2727 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2728 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002729
2730 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2731 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2732 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002733 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2734 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002735
2736 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2737 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2738
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002739 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002740
2741
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002742option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002743 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2744 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2745 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002746 Arguments :
2747 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2748 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2749 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2750 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2751 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002752
2753 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2754 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2755 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2756 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2757 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2758 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2759 ports.
2760
2761 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2762
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002763 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2764 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2765 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2766 by default.
2767
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002768 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002769
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002770
2771option http_proxy
2772no option http_proxy
2773 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2774 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2775 yes | yes | yes | yes
2776 Arguments : none
2777
2778 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2779 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2780 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2781 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2782 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2783
2784 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2785 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2786 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2787 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2788 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2789 be analyzed.
2790
2791 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2792 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2793
2794 Example :
2795 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2796 backend direct_forward
2797 option httpclose
2798 option http_proxy
2799
2800 See also : "option httpclose"
2801
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002802
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002803option independant-streams
2804no option independant-streams
2805 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2806 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2807 yes | yes | yes | yes
2808 Arguments : none
2809
2810 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2811 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2812 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2813 receive data or not.
2814
2815 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2816 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2817 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2818 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2819 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2820 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2821 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2822 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2823 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2824 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2825 socket buffers.
2826
2827 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2828 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2829 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2830 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2831 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2832
2833 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2834
2835
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002836option log-health-checks
2837no option log-health-checks
2838 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2839 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2840 yes | no | yes | yes
2841 Arguments : none
2842
2843 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2844 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2845 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2846 of additional information is limited.
2847
2848 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2849 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
2850
2851 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
2852
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002853
2854option log-separate-errors
2855no option log-separate-errors
2856 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
2857 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2858 yes | yes | yes | no
2859 Arguments : none
2860
2861 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
2862 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
2863 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
2864 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
2865 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
2866 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
2867 provides very important information.
2868
2869 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
2870 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
2871 error logs.
2872
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002873 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002874 logging.
2875
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002876
2877option logasap
2878no option logasap
2879 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
2880 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2881 yes | yes | yes | no
2882 Arguments : none
2883
2884 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
2885 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
2886 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
2887 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
2888 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
2889 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
2890 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002891 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002892 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
2893 bytes are expected to be transferred.
2894
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002895 Examples :
2896 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
2897 mode http
2898 option httplog
2899 option logasap
2900 log 192.168.2.200 local3
2901
2902 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
2903 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
2904 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
2905 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
2906
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002907 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002908 logging.
2909
2910
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002911option mysql-check
2912 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
2913 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2914 yes | no | yes | yes
2915 Arguments : none
2916
2917 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
2918 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
2919 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
2920 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
2921 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
2922
2923 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
2924 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
2925 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
2926 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
2927 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
2928 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
2929
2930 See also: "option httpchk"
2931
2932
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002933option nolinger
2934no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002935 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002936 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2937 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01002938 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002939
2940 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
2941 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
2942 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
2943 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
2944 connections.
2945
2946 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
2947 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
2948 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
2949 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
2950 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
2951 this too.
2952
2953 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
2954 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
2955 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
2956
2957 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
2958 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
2959 for servers.
2960
2961 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2962 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2963
2964
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002965option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
2966 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
2967 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2968 yes | yes | yes | yes
2969 Arguments :
2970 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2971 matching <network>
2972 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
2973 header name.
2974
2975 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
2976 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
2977 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
2978 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
2979 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
2980 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
2981 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
2982 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
2983 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2984 possible that the client has already brought one.
2985
2986 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
2987 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
2988 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
2989 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
2990 header and requires different one.
2991
2992 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2993 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2994 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2995 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2996 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2997 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2998 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2999
3000 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3001 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3002 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3003 both are defined.
3004
3005 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3006 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3007 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3008 when using this option.
3009
3010 Examples :
3011 # Original Destination address
3012 frontend www
3013 mode http
3014 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3015
3016 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3017 backend www
3018 mode http
3019 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3020
3021 See also : "option httpclose"
3022
3023
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003024option persist
3025no option persist
3026 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3027 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3028 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003029 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003030
3031 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3032 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3033 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3034 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3035 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3036 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3037 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3038 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3039 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3040 redirected to another valid server.
3041
3042 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3043 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3044
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003045 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003046
3047
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003048option redispatch
3049no option redispatch
3050 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3051 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3052 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003053 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003054
3055 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3056 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3057 be able to access the service anymore.
3058
3059 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3060 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3061
3062 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3063 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3064 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003065
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003066 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3067 "redisp" keywords.
3068
3069 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3070 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3071
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003072 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003073
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003074
3075option smtpchk
3076option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3077 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3078 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3079 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003080 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003081 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3082 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3083 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3084
3085 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3086 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3087 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3088
3089 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3090 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3091 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3092 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3093 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3094 dead server.
3095
3096 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3097 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3098 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3099 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3100
3101 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3102 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3103 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3104 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3105 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3106
3107 Example :
3108 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3109
3110 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3111
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003112
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003113option socket-stats
3114no option socket-stats
3115
3116 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3117 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3118 yes | yes | yes | no
3119
3120 Arguments : none
3121
3122
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003123option splice-auto
3124no option splice-auto
3125 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3126 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3127 yes | yes | yes | yes
3128 Arguments : none
3129
3130 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3131 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3132 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3133 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003134 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003135 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3136 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3137 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3138 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3139
3140 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3141 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3142 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3143 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3144 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3145 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3146 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3147 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3148 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3149 keyword.
3150
3151 Example :
3152 option splice-auto
3153
3154 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3155 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3156
3157 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3158 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3159
3160
3161option splice-request
3162no option splice-request
3163 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3164 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3165 yes | yes | yes | yes
3166 Arguments : none
3167
3168 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3169 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3170 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3171 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3172 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3173 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3174
3175 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3176
3177 Example :
3178 option splice-request
3179
3180 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3181 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3182
3183 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3184 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3185
3186
3187option splice-response
3188no option splice-response
3189 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3190 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3191 yes | yes | yes | yes
3192 Arguments : none
3193
3194 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3195 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3196 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3197 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3198 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3199 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3200
3201 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3202
3203 Example :
3204 option splice-response
3205
3206 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3207 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3208
3209 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3210 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3211
3212
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003213option srvtcpka
3214no option srvtcpka
3215 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3216 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3217 yes | no | yes | yes
3218 Arguments : none
3219
3220 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3221 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3222 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3223 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3224
3225 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3226 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3227 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3228 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3229
3230 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3231 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3232 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3233 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3234 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3235
3236 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3237
3238 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3239 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3240 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3241
3242 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3243 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3244
3245 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3246
3247
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003248option ssl-hello-chk
3249 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3250 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3251 yes | no | yes | yes
3252 Arguments : none
3253
3254 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3255 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3256 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3257 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3258 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3259 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3260 hello message.
3261
3262 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3263 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3264 messages, which is appreciable.
3265
3266 See also: "option httpchk"
3267
3268
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003269option tcp-smart-accept
3270no option tcp-smart-accept
3271 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3272 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3273 yes | yes | yes | no
3274 Arguments : none
3275
3276 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3277 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3278 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3279 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3280 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3281 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3282
3283 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3284 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3285 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3286 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3287
3288 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3289 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3290 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3291 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3292
3293 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3294 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3295 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3296
3297 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3298 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3299 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3300
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003301 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3302
3303
3304option tcp-smart-connect
3305no option tcp-smart-connect
3306 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3307 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3308 yes | no | yes | yes
3309 Arguments : none
3310
3311 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3312 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3313 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3314 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3315 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3316
3317 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3318 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3319 complex.
3320
3321 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3322 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3323 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3324
3325 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3326 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3327
3328 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3329
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003330
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003331option tcpka
3332 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3333 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3334 yes | yes | yes | yes
3335 Arguments : none
3336
3337 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3338 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3339 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3340 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3341
3342 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3343 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3344 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3345 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3346
3347 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3348 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3349 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3350 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3351 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3352
3353 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3354
3355 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3356 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3357 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3358 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3359 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3360 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3361 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3362 backends.
3363
3364 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3365
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003366
3367option tcplog
3368 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3369 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3370 yes | yes | yes | yes
3371 Arguments : none
3372
3373 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3374 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3375 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3376 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3377 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3378 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3379 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3380 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3381
3382 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3383
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003384 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003385
3386
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003387option transparent
3388no option transparent
3389 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3390 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003391 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003392 Arguments : none
3393
3394 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3395 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3396 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3397 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3398 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3399 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3400 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3401 appropriate server.
3402
3403 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3404 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3405
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003406 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3407 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003408
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003409
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003410persist rdp-cookie
3411persist rdp-cookie(name)
3412 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3413 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3414 yes | no | yes | yes
3415 Arguments :
3416 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3417 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3418 no valid reason to change this name.
3419
3420 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3421 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3422 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3423 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3424 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3425 forwarded to this server.
3426
3427 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3428 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3429 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003430 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003431 a single "listen" section.
3432
3433 Example :
3434 listen tse-farm
3435 bind :3389
3436 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3437 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3438 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3439 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3440 persist rdp-cookie
3441 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3442 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3443 balance rdp-cookie
3444 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3445 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3446
3447 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3448
3449
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003450rate-limit sessions <rate>
3451 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3452 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3453 yes | yes | yes | no
3454 Arguments :
3455 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3456 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3457
3458 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3459 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3460 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3461 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3462 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3463 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3464
3465 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3466 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3467 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3468 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3469
3470 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3471 listen smtp
3472 mode tcp
3473 bind :25
3474 rate-limit sessions 10
3475 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3476
3477 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3478 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3479
3480 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3481
3482
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003483redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3484redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003485 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3486 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3487 no | yes | yes | yes
3488
3489 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003490 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003491
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003492 Arguments :
3493 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3494 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3495 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3496 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003497 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3498 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3499 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3500 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003501
3502 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3503 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3504 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3505 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3506 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3507 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3508 location with a GET method.
3509
3510 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3511 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3512
3513 - "drop-query"
3514 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3515 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3516 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3517 with a location-type redirect.
3518
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003519 - "append-slash"
3520 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3521 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3522 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3523 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3524
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003525 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3526 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3527 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3528 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3529 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3530 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3531 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3532
3533 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3534 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3535 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3536 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3537 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3538 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3539 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003540
3541 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3542 acl clear dst_port 80
3543 acl secure dst_port 8080
3544 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003545 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003546 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003547 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3548
3549 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003550 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3551 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3552 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003553 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003554
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003555 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3556 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3557 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3558
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003559 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003560
3561
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003562redisp (deprecated)
3563redispatch (deprecated)
3564 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3565 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3566 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003567 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003568
3569 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3570 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3571 be able to access the service anymore.
3572
3573 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3574 redistribute them to a working server.
3575
3576 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3577 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3578 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003579
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003580 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3581 "option redispatch" instead.
3582
3583 See also : "option redispatch"
3584
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003585
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003586reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003587 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3588 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3589 no | yes | yes | yes
3590 Arguments :
3591 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3592 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003593 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003594
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003595 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3596 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3597
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003598 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3599 the last header of an HTTP request.
3600
3601 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3602 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3603 responses.
3604
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003605 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3606 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3607 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3608
3609 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3610 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003611
3612
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003613reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3614reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003615 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3616 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3617 no | yes | yes | yes
3618 Arguments :
3619 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3620 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3621 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3622 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3623 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3624 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3625 ignores case.
3626
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003627 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3628 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3629
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003630 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3631 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3632 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3633 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003634 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003635
3636 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3637 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3638
3639 Example :
3640 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3641 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3642 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3643
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003644 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3645 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003646
3647
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003648reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3649reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003650 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3651 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3652 no | yes | yes | yes
3653 Arguments :
3654 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3655 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3656 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3657 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3658 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3659 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3660
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003661 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3662 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3663
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003664 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3665 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3666 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3667 next servers.
3668
3669 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3670 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3671 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3672
3673 Example :
3674 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3675 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3676 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3677
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003678 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3679 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003680
3681
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003682reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3683reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003684 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3685 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3686 no | yes | yes | yes
3687 Arguments :
3688 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3689 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3690 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3691 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3692 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3693 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3694 case.
3695
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003696 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3697 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3698
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003699 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3700 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3701 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3702 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003703 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003704
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003705 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003706 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003707 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003708
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003709 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3710 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3711
3712 Example :
3713 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3714 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3715 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3716
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003717 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3718 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003719
3720
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003721reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3722reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003723 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3724 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3725 no | yes | yes | yes
3726 Arguments :
3727 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3728 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3729 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3730 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3731 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3732 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3733 case.
3734
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003735 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3736 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3737
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003738 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3739 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3740 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3741 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3742
3743 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3744 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3745
3746 Example :
3747 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3748 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3749 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3750 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3751
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003752 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3753 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003754
3755
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003756reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3757reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003758 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3759 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3760 no | yes | yes | yes
3761 Arguments :
3762 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3763 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3764 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3765 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3766 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3767 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3768
3769 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3770 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3771 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3772 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003773 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003774
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003775 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3776 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3777
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003778 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3779 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3780 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3781
3782 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3783 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3784 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3785 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3786 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3787
3788 Example :
3789 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3790 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3791 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3792 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3793
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003794 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3795 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003796
3797
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003798reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3799reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003800 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3801 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3802 no | yes | yes | yes
3803 Arguments :
3804 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3805 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3806 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3807 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3808 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3809 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3810 ignores case.
3811
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003812 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3813 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3814
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003815 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3816 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003817 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3818 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3819 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003820 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3821 not set.
3822
3823 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3824 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3825 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3826 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3827 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3828
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003829 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003830 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3831 # block all others.
3832 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3833 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3834
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003835 # block bad guys
3836 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
3837 reqitarpit . if badguys
3838
3839 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
3840 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003841
3842
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003843retries <value>
3844 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3845 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3846 yes | no | yes | yes
3847 Arguments :
3848 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3849 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
3850 default value is 3.
3851
3852 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
3853 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
3854 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
3855
3856 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
3857 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
3858
3859 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
3860 server even if a cookie references a different server.
3861
3862 See also : "option redispatch"
3863
3864
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003865rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003866 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
3867 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3868 no | yes | yes | yes
3869 Arguments :
3870 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3871 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003872 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003873
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003874 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3875 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3876
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003877 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3878 the last header of an HTTP response.
3879
3880 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3881 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3882 responses.
3883
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003884 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3885 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003886
3887
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003888rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3889rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003890 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
3891 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3892 no | yes | yes | yes
3893 Arguments :
3894 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3895 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3896 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3897 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3898 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3899 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
3900 ignores case.
3901
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003902 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3903 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3904
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003905 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
3906 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3907 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
3908 client.
3909
3910 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3911 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3912 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3913
3914 Example :
3915 # remove the Server header from responses
3916 reqidel ^Server:.*
3917
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003918 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3919 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003920
3921
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003922rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3923rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003924 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
3925 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3926 no | yes | yes | yes
3927 Arguments :
3928 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3929 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3930 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3931 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3932 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3933 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
3934 ignores case.
3935
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003936 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3937 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3938
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003939 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3940 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
3941 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
3942 case-sensitive.
3943
3944 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003945 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
3946 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
3947 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003948
3949 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3950 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
3951
3952 Example :
3953 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
3954 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
3955
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003956 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
3957 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003958
3959
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003960rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3961rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003962 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
3963 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3964 no | yes | yes | yes
3965 Arguments :
3966 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3967 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3968 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3969 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3970 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3971 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
3972 ignores case.
3973
3974 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3975 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3976 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3977 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003978 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003979
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003980 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3981 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3982
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003983 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
3984 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
3985 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
3986
3987 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3988 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3989 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3990 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
3991 are not case-sensitive.
3992
3993 Example :
3994 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
3995 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
3996
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003997 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
3998 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003999
4000
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004001server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4002 Declare a server in a backend
4003 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4004 no | no | yes | yes
4005 Arguments :
4006 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4007 appear in logs and alerts.
4008
4009 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4010 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4011 start-up.
4012
4013 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4014 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4015 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4016 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4017 adding this value to the client's port.
4018
4019 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4020 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004021 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004022
4023 Examples :
4024 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4025 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4026
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004027 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004028
4029
4030source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004031source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004032 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4033 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4034 yes | no | yes | yes
4035 Arguments :
4036 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4037 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4038 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4039 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4040
4041 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4042 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004043 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4044 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4045 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004046
4047 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4048 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4049 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4050 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4051 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4052 <addr>.
4053
4054 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4055 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4056 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4057 port.
4058
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004059 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4060 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4061 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4062 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4063 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4064 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4065
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004066 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4067 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4068 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4069 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4070
4071 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4072 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4073 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4074 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4075 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4076 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4077
4078 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4079 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4080 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4081 there are two methods :
4082
4083 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4084 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4085 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4086 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4087 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4088 of the client ranges may be used.
4089
4090 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4091 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4092 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4093 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4094 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4095 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4096 same session.
4097
4098 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4099 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4100 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4101 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4102 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4103 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4104
4105 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4106 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4107 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004108 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004109
4110 Examples :
4111 backend private
4112 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4113 source 192.168.1.200
4114
4115 backend transparent_ssl1
4116 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4117 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4118
4119 backend transparent_ssl2
4120 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4121 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4122 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4123
4124 backend transparent_ssl3
4125 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4126 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4127 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4128
4129 backend transparent_smtp
4130 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4131 # with Tproxy version 4.
4132 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4133
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004134 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004135 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4136
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004137
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004138srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4139 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4140 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4141 yes | no | yes | yes
4142 Arguments :
4143 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4144 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4145 as explained at the top of this document.
4146
4147 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4148 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4149 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4150 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4151 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4152 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4153 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4154
4155 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4156 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4157 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4158 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4159 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004160 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004161 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004162 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004163
4164 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4165 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4166 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4167 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4168 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4169 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4170
4171 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4172 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4173
4174 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4175
4176
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004177stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4178 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4179 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4180 yes | no | yes | yes
4181 Arguments :
4182 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4183
4184 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4185
4186 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4187 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4188 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4189 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4190 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4191 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4192
4193 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4194 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4195 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4196 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4197
4198 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4199 report using "stats scope".
4200
4201 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4202 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4203 unobvious parameters.
4204
4205 Example :
4206 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4207 backend public_www
4208 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4209 stats enable
4210 stats hide-version
4211 stats scope .
4212 stats uri /admin?stats
4213 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4214 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4215 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4216
4217 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4218 backend private_monitoring
4219 stats enable
4220 stats uri /admin?stats
4221 stats refresh 5s
4222
4223 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4224
4225
4226stats enable
4227 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4228 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4229 yes | no | yes | yes
4230 Arguments : none
4231
4232 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4233 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4234 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4235 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4236 - stats auth : no authentication
4237 - stats scope : no restriction
4238
4239 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4240 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4241 unobvious parameters.
4242
4243 Example :
4244 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4245 backend public_www
4246 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4247 stats enable
4248 stats hide-version
4249 stats scope .
4250 stats uri /admin?stats
4251 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4252 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4253 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4254
4255 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4256 backend private_monitoring
4257 stats enable
4258 stats uri /admin?stats
4259 stats refresh 5s
4260
4261 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4262
4263
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004264stats show-node [ <name> ]
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004265 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4266 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4267 yes | no | yes | yes
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004268 Arguments:
4269 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4270 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004271
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004272 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4273 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4274 provided for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004275
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004276 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4277 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4278 unobvious parameters.
4279
4280 Example:
4281 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4282 backend private_monitoring
4283 stats enable
4284 stats show-node Europe-1
4285 stats uri /admin?stats
4286 stats refresh 5s
4287
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004288 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4289 section.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004290
4291
4292stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4293 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4294 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4295 yes | no | yes | yes
4296
4297 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4298 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4299
4300 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4301 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004302
4303 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4304 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4305 unobvious parameters.
4306
4307 Example :
4308 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4309 backend private_monitoring
4310 stats enable
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004311 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004312 stats uri /admin?stats
4313 stats refresh 5s
4314
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004315 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4316 global section.
4317
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004318
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004319stats show-legends
4320 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4321 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4322 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4323 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4324 - IP (socket, server)
4325 - cookie (backend, server)
4326
4327 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4328 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4329 unobvious parameters.
4330
4331 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004332
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004333
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004334stats realm <realm>
4335 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4336 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4337 yes | no | yes | yes
4338 Arguments :
4339 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4340 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4341 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4342
4343 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4344 using a backslash ('\').
4345
4346 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4347 only related to authentication.
4348
4349 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4350 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4351 unobvious parameters.
4352
4353 Example :
4354 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4355 backend public_www
4356 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4357 stats enable
4358 stats hide-version
4359 stats scope .
4360 stats uri /admin?stats
4361 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4362 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4363 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4364
4365 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4366 backend private_monitoring
4367 stats enable
4368 stats uri /admin?stats
4369 stats refresh 5s
4370
4371 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4372
4373
4374stats refresh <delay>
4375 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4376 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4377 yes | no | yes | yes
4378 Arguments :
4379 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4380 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4381 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4382 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4383 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4384 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4385
4386 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4387 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4388 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4389 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4390
4391 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4392 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4393 unobvious parameters.
4394
4395 Example :
4396 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4397 backend public_www
4398 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4399 stats enable
4400 stats hide-version
4401 stats scope .
4402 stats uri /admin?stats
4403 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4404 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4405 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4406
4407 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4408 backend private_monitoring
4409 stats enable
4410 stats uri /admin?stats
4411 stats refresh 5s
4412
4413 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4414
4415
4416stats scope { <name> | "." }
4417 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4418 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4419 yes | no | yes | yes
4420 Arguments :
4421 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4422 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4423 section in which the statement appears.
4424
4425 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4426 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4427 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4428 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4429 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4430 exists.
4431
4432 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4433 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4434 unobvious parameters.
4435
4436 Example :
4437 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4438 backend public_www
4439 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4440 stats enable
4441 stats hide-version
4442 stats scope .
4443 stats uri /admin?stats
4444 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4445 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4446 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4447
4448 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4449 backend private_monitoring
4450 stats enable
4451 stats uri /admin?stats
4452 stats refresh 5s
4453
4454 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4455
4456
4457stats uri <prefix>
4458 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4459 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4460 yes | no | yes | yes
4461 Arguments :
4462 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4463 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4464 query string.
4465
4466 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4467 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4468 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4469 possible to reach it in the application.
4470
4471 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004472 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004473 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4474 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4475 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4476 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4477
4478 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4479 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4480 an address or a port to statistics only.
4481
4482 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4483 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4484 unobvious parameters.
4485
4486 Example :
4487 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4488 backend public_www
4489 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4490 stats enable
4491 stats hide-version
4492 stats scope .
4493 stats uri /admin?stats
4494 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4495 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4496 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4497
4498 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4499 backend private_monitoring
4500 stats enable
4501 stats uri /admin?stats
4502 stats refresh 5s
4503
4504 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4505
4506
4507stats hide-version
4508 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
4509 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4510 yes | no | yes | yes
4511 Arguments : none
4512
4513 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4514 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4515 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4516 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4517 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4518 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
4519
4520 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4521 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4522 unobvious parameters.
4523
4524 Example :
4525 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4526 backend public_www
4527 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4528 stats enable
4529 stats hide-version
4530 stats scope .
4531 stats uri /admin?stats
4532 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4533 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4534 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4535
4536 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4537 backend private_monitoring
4538 stats enable
4539 stats uri /admin?stats
4540 stats refresh 5s
4541
4542 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4543
4544
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004545stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4546 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
4547 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4548 no | no | yes | yes
4549
4550 Arguments :
4551 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4552 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4553 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4554 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4555
4556 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4557 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4558 the "stick-table" statement.
4559
4560 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4561 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4562 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4563 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4564 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4565
4566 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4567 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4568 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4569 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4570 transformation rules.
4571
4572 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4573 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4574 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4575 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4576 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4577 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4578 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4579
4580 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4581 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4582 ACL based conditions.
4583
4584 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4585 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4586 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4587 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4588
4589 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4590 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4591 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4592 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4593
4594 Example :
4595 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4596 # last 30 minutes
4597 backend pop
4598 mode tcp
4599 balance roundrobin
4600 stick store-request src
4601 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4602 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4603 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4604
4605 backend smtp
4606 mode tcp
4607 balance roundrobin
4608 stick match src table pop
4609 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4610 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4611
4612 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4613 extraction.
4614
4615
4616stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4617 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4618 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4619 no | no | yes | yes
4620
4621 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4622 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4623 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4624 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4625
4626 Examples :
4627 # The following form ...
4628 stick or src table pop if !localhost
4629
4630 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4631 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4632 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4633
4634
4635 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4636 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4637 backend http
4638 mode http
4639 balance roundrobin
4640 stick on src table https
4641 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4642 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4643 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4644
4645 backend https
4646 mode tcp
4647 balance roundrobin
4648 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4649 stick on src
4650 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4651 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4652
4653 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4654
4655
4656stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4657 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4658 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4659 no | no | yes | yes
4660
4661 Arguments :
4662 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4663 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4664 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4665 server is selected.
4666
4667 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4668 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4669 the "stick-table" statement.
4670
4671 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4672 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4673 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4674 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4675 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4676 address.
4677
4678 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4679 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4680 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4681 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4682 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4683 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4684 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4685 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4686 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4687 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4688
4689 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4690 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4691 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4692 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4693 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4694 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4695 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4696
4697 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4698 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4699 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4700 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4701
4702 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4703 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4704 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4705 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4706 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4707 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4708 another protocol or access method.
4709
4710 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4711 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4712 the request.
4713
4714 Example :
4715 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4716 # last 30 minutes
4717 backend pop
4718 mode tcp
4719 balance roundrobin
4720 stick store-request src
4721 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4722 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4723 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4724
4725 backend smtp
4726 mode tcp
4727 balance roundrobin
4728 stick match src table pop
4729 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4730 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4731
4732 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4733 extraction.
4734
4735
4736stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4737 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4738 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4739 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4740 no | no | yes | yes
4741
4742 Arguments :
4743 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4744 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4745 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4746 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4747
4748 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4749 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4750 instance.
4751
4752 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4753 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4754 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4755 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4756 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4757 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4758 to 31 characters.
4759
4760 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4761 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4762 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4763 increase.
4764
4765 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
4766 value directly impats memory usage. Count approximately 50 bytes
4767 per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size supports
4768 suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
4769
4770 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
4771 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
4772 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
4773 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
4774 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
4775 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
4776 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
4777 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
4778 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
4779 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
4780 parameter (see below).
4781
4782 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
4783 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
4784 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
4785 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
4786 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
4787 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
4788 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
4789 if not expiration delay is specified.
4790
4791 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
4792 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
4793 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
4794 reference it.
4795
4796 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
4797 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
4798 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
4799 as an exclusive stickiness.
4800
4801 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
4802 about time format.
4803
4804
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004805tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4806 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4807 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4808 no | yes | yes | no
4809
4810 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4811 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4812 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4813 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4814 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4815 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4816 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4817 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4818
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004819 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004820 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4821
4822 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
4823 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
4824 "reject" statement.
4825
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004826 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004827
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004828 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004829
4830
4831tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
4832 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4833 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4834 no | yes | yes | no
4835
4836 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
4837 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4838 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4839 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4840 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4841 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4842 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4843 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4844
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004845 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004846 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4847
4848 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
4849 "accept".
4850
4851 Example:
4852 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
4853 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4854 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4855 tcp-request reject if content_present
4856
4857 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
4858 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4859 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4860 tcp-request accept if content_present
4861 tcp-request reject
4862
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004863 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004864
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004865 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004866
4867
4868tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
4869 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
4870 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4871 no | yes | yes | no
4872 Arguments :
4873 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4874 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4875 as explained at the top of this document.
4876
4877 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
4878 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
4879 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
4880 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
4881 data for at most the specified amount of time.
4882
4883 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
4884 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004885 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004886 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01004887 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
4888 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
4889 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
4890 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004891
4892 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
4893 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
4894 it pass through unaffected.
4895
4896 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
4897 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
4898 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004899 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004900 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
4901 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
4902 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
4903
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004904 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004905 "timeout client".
4906
4907
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004908timeout check <timeout>
4909 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
4910 established.
4911
4912 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4913 yes | no | yes | yes
4914 Arguments:
4915 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4916 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4917 as explained at the top of this document.
4918
4919 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
4920 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
4921 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
4922 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
4923 Of course it is better to use "check queue" and "check tarpit" instead of
4924 long "timeout connect".
4925
4926 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
4927 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
4928
4929 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
4930 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01004931 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004932
4933 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4934 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4935 forget about it.
4936
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01004937 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
4938 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004939
4940
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004941timeout client <timeout>
4942timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4943 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
4944 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4945 yes | yes | yes | no
4946 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004947 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004948 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4949 as explained at the top of this document.
4950
4951 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
4952 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4953 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
4954 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
4955 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
4956 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
4957 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
4958 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004959 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004960 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
4961 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
4962
4963 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
4964 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4965 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4966 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4967 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4968 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4969
4970 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
4971 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
4972 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
4973
4974 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
4975
4976
4977timeout connect <timeout>
4978timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4979 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
4980 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4981 yes | no | yes | yes
4982 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004983 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004984 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4985 as explained at the top of this document.
4986
4987 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004988 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004989 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004990 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004991 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
4992 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004993
4994 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4995 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4996 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4997 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4998 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
4999 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5000
5001 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5002 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5003 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5004
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005005 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5006 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005007
5008
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005009timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5010 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5011 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5012 yes | yes | yes | yes
5013 Arguments :
5014 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5015 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5016 as explained at the top of this document.
5017
5018 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5019 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5020 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5021 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5022 once the request has started to present itself.
5023
5024 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5025 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5026 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5027 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5028 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5029
5030 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5031 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5032 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5033 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5034
5035 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5036 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5037 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5038 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5039 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
5040 with tends to hundreds of thousands of clients.
5041
5042 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5043 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5044 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5045 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5046
5047 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5048
5049
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005050timeout http-request <timeout>
5051 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5052 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005053 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005054 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005055 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005056 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5057 as explained at the top of this document.
5058
5059 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5060 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5061 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5062 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5063 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5064 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5065 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5066 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5067
5068 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5069 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005070 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5071 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005072
5073 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5074 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5075 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5076 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5077 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5078
5079 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005080 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5081 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5082 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005083
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005084 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005085
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005086
5087timeout queue <timeout>
5088 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5089 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5090 yes | no | yes | yes
5091 Arguments :
5092 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5093 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5094 as explained at the top of this document.
5095
5096 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5097 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5098 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5099 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5100 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5101
5102 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5103 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5104 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5105 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5106
5107 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5108
5109
5110timeout server <timeout>
5111timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5112 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5113 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5114 yes | no | yes | yes
5115 Arguments :
5116 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5117 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5118 as explained at the top of this document.
5119
5120 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5121 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5122 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5123 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5124 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5125 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5126 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5127
5128 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5129 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5130 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5131 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5132 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005133 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005134 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005135 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005136
5137 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5138 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5139 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5140 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5141 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5142 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5143
5144 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5145 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5146 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5147
5148 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5149
5150
5151timeout tarpit <timeout>
5152 Set the duration for which tapitted connections will be maintained
5153 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5154 yes | yes | yes | yes
5155 Arguments :
5156 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5157 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5158 as explained at the top of this document.
5159
5160 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5161 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5162 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5163
5164 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5165 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5166 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5167 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005168 with no "timeout tapit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005169
5170 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5171
5172
5173transparent (deprecated)
5174 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5175 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005176 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005177 Arguments : none
5178
5179 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5180 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5181 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5182 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5183 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5184 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5185 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5186 appropriate server.
5187
5188 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5189
5190 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5191 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5192
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005193 See also: "option transparent"
5194
5195
5196use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5197use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005198 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005199 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5200 no | yes | yes | no
5201 Arguments :
5202 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5203
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005204 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005205
5206 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5207 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5208 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005209 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5210 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5211 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5212 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005213
5214 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5215 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5216 assign the backend.
5217
5218 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5219 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5220 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5221 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5222 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5223 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5224
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005225 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005226 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005227 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5228 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5229 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5230
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005231 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005232
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005233
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010052345. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005235-----------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005236
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005237The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5238which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5239arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5240settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5241after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5242Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5243address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005244
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005245 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005246 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005247
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005248The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005249
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005250addr <ipv4>
5251 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5252 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5253 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5254 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5255 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005256
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005257 Supported in default-server: No
5258
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005259backup
5260 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5261 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5262 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5263 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5264 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5265 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005266
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005267 Supported in default-server: No
5268
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005269check
5270 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5271 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5272 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5273 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5274 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5275 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5276 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5277 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5278 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005279 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5280 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005281
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005282 Supported in default-server: No
5283
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005284cookie <value>
5285 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5286 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5287 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5288 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5289 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5290 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5291 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5292
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005293 Supported in default-server: No
5294
5295error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005296 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5297 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5298 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005299
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005300 Supported in default-server: Yes
5301
5302 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005303
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005304fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005305 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5306 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5307 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5308
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005309 Supported in default-server: Yes
5310
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005311id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005312 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5313 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5314 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005315
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005316 Supported in default-server: No
5317
5318inter <delay>
5319fastinter <delay>
5320downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005321 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5322 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5323 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5324 between checks depending on the server state :
5325
5326 Server state | Interval used
5327 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5328 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5329 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5330 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5331 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5332 or yet unchecked. |
5333 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5334 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5335 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005336
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005337 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5338 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5339 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5340 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5341 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5342 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5343 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5344 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5345 servers.
5346
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005347 Supported in default-server: Yes
5348
5349maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005350 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5351 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5352 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5353 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5354 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5355 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5356 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5357 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5358
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005359 Supported in default-server: Yes
5360
5361maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005362 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5363 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5364 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5365 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5366 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5367 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5368 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5369
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005370 Supported in default-server: Yes
5371
5372minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005373 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5374 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5375 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5376 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5377 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5378 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005379 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005380 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005381
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005382 Supported in default-server: Yes
5383
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005384observe <mode>
5385 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5386 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5387 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5388 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5389 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5390 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5391 headers, a timeout, etc.
5392
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005393 Supported in default-server: No
5394
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005395 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5396
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005397on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005398 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5399 Currently, four modes are available:
5400 - fastinter: force fastinter
5401 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5402 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5403 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5404 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5405
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005406 Supported in default-server: Yes
5407
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005408 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5409
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005410port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005411 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5412 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5413 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5414 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5415 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5416 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5417
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005418 Supported in default-server: Yes
5419
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005420redir <prefix>
5421 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5422 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5423 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5424 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5425 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5426 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5427 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5428 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005429 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005430 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5431 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5432 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5433 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5434 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5435
5436 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5437
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005438 Supported in default-server: No
5439
5440rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005441 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5442 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5443 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5444
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005445 Supported in default-server: Yes
5446
5447slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005448 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5449 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5450 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5451 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5452 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5453 parameters :
5454
5455 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5456 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5457
5458 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5459 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5460 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5461 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5462
5463 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5464 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5465 seen as failed.
5466
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005467 Supported in default-server: Yes
5468
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005469source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
5470source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005471 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5472 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5473 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5474 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5475
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005476 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5477 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5478 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5479 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5480 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5481 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5482 server.
5483
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005484 Supported in default-server: No
5485
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005486track [<proxy>/]<server>
5487 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5488 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5489 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5490 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5491 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5492
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005493 Supported in default-server: No
5494
5495weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005496 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5497 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5498 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005499 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5500 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5501 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5502 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5503 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5504 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005505
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005506 Supported in default-server: Yes
5507
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005508
55096. HTTP header manipulation
5510---------------------------
5511
5512In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5513response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5514request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5515which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5516against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5517to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5518passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5519headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5520never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5521
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005522There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5523(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5524rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5525messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5526in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005527happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005528add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5529normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5530
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005531This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5532in section 4.2 :
5533
5534 - reqadd <string>
5535 - reqallow <search>
5536 - reqiallow <search>
5537 - reqdel <search>
5538 - reqidel <search>
5539 - reqdeny <search>
5540 - reqideny <search>
5541 - reqpass <search>
5542 - reqipass <search>
5543 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5544 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5545 - reqtarpit <search>
5546 - reqitarpit <search>
5547 - rspadd <string>
5548 - rspdel <search>
5549 - rspidel <search>
5550 - rspdeny <search>
5551 - rspideny <search>
5552 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5553 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5554
5555With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5556is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5557parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5558prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5559Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5560
5561 \t for a tab
5562 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5563 \n for a new line (LF)
5564 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5565 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5566 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5567 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5568 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5569
5570The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5571portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5572above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5573regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
55749 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5575is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5576
5577The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5578after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5579
5580Notes related to these keywords :
5581---------------------------------
5582 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5583 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5584 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5585
5586 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5587 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5588 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5589
5590 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5591 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5592 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5593 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5594 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5595
5596 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5597 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5598 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5599 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5600 useless headers before adding new ones.
5601
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005602 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005603 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5604
5605 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5606 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5607 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5608
5609 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5610 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005611 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005612
5613
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010056147. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5615------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005616
5617The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5618content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5619from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5620simple :
5621
5622 - define test criteria with sets of values
5623 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5624
5625The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5626
5627In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5628
5629 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5630
5631This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5632Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5633and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5634an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5635of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5636
5637ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5638'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5639which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5640
5641There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5642performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5643
5644The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5645
5646 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005647 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5648
5649Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005650
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005651 - integers or integer ranges
5652 - strings
5653 - regular expressions
5654 - IP addresses and networks
5655
5656
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020056577.1. Matching integers
5658----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005659
5660Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5661that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5662expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5663may be omitted.
5664
5665For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5666unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5667representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5668
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005669As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5670two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5671instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5672ranges and operators.
5673
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005674For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005675operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5676Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5677of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005678
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005679Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005680
5681 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5682 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5683 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5684 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5685 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5686
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005687For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005688
5689 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5690
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005691This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5692
5693 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5694
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005695
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020056967.2. Matching strings
5697---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005698
5699String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5700exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5701characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5702string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5703to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005704before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005705
5706
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057077.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5708-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005709
5710Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5711they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5712possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5713passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5714the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005715the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5716match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005717
5718
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057197.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5720----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005721
5722IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5723netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5724within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005725host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005726difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5727at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5728does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5729parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005730
5731
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057327.5. Available matching criteria
5733--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005734
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057357.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5736------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005737
5738A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5739analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5740addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5741
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005742always_false
5743 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5744 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5745
5746always_true
5747 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5748 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5749
5750src <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005751 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005752 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
5753 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
5754
5755src_port <integer>
5756 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
5757
5758dst <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005759 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005760 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
5761
5762dst_port <integer>
5763 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
5764 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
5765
5766dst_conn <integer>
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005767 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005768 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005769 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005770 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
5771 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
5772 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
5773
5774fe_conn <integer>
5775fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
5776 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
5777 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
5778 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5779 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
5780 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
5781 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
5782 criteria.
5783
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01005784fe_id <integer>
5785 Applies to the fronted's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
5786 frontend it was called.
5787
5788so_id <integer>
5789 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
5790
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005791be_conn <integer>
5792be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5793 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5794 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5795 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5796 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5797 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005798
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005799nbsrv <integer>
5800nbsrv(backend) <integer>
5801 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
5802 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
5803 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
5804 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
5805 "monitor fail".
5806
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005807connslots <integer>
5808connslots(backend) <integer>
5809 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005810 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005811 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5812
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005813 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5814 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005815
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005816 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005817 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5818 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5819 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5820 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5821 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005822 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005823
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005824 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5825 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5826 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5827 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005828
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005829queue <integer>
5830queue(frontend) <integer>
5831 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
5832 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
5833 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
5834 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
5835 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
5836 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
5837 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5838
5839avg_queue <integer>
5840avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5841 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5842 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5843 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5844 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5845 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5846 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5847 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5848 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5849 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5850 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5851 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5852
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005853fe_sess_rate <integer>
5854fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
5855 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
5856 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
5857 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
5858 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
5859 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
5860 the rate to go down below the limit.
5861
5862 Example :
5863 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
5864 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
5865 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
5866 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
5867 frontend mail
5868 bind :25
5869 mode tcp
5870 maxconn 100
5871 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
5872 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
5873 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
5874 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005875
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005876be_sess_rate <integer>
5877be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5878 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5879 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5880 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005881 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005882 sucking of an online dictionary).
5883
5884 Example :
5885 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5886 backend dynamic
5887 mode http
5888 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5889 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
5890
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005891
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058927.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
5893-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005894
5895A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
5896during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
5897through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
5898for more detailed information on the subject.
5899
5900req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005901 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005902 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
5903 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
5904 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
5905 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
5906 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
5907 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
5908
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005909req_proto_http
5910 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
5911 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005912 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005913 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
5914 using TCP request content inspection rules.
5915
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005916req_rdp_cookie <string>
5917req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
5918 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
5919 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
5920 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
5921 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
5922 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
5923 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
5924 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
5925 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
5926
5927req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
5928req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
5929 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
5930 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
5931 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
5932 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
5933 cookies.
5934
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005935req_ssl_ver <decimal>
5936 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
5937 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
5938 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
5939 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
5940 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
5941 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
5942 with TCP request content inspection.
5943
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02005944wait_end
5945 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
5946 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
5947 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
5948 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
5949 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
5950 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
5951 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
5952 inspection.
5953
5954 Examples :
5955 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
5956 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
5957 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
5958
5959 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
5960 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
5961 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
5962 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
5963 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
5964 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
5965 tcp-request content reject
5966
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005967
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059687.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
5969--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005970
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005971A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005972application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
5973read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
5974than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
5975
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005976method <string>
5977 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
5978 already check for most common methods.
5979
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01005980status <integer>
5981 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
5982 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
5983 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
5984
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005985req_ver <string>
5986 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
5987 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
5988
5989path <string>
5990 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
5991 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
5992 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
5993
5994path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005995 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
5996 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005997
5998path_end <string>
5999 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6000 control file name extension.
6001
6002path_sub <string>
6003 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6004 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6005 "path_dir".
6006
6007path_dir <string>
6008 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6009 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6010 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6011 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6012
6013path_dom <string>
6014 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6015 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6016 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6017
6018path_reg <regex>
6019 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6020 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6021 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6022
6023url <string>
6024 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6025 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6026
6027url_beg <string>
6028 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6029 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6030
6031url_end <string>
6032 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6033 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
6034
6035url_sub <string>
6036 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6037 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
6038
6039url_dir <string>
6040 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6041 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6042 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6043 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6044
6045url_dom <string>
6046 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6047 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6048 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6049
6050url_reg <regex>
6051 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6052 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6053 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
6054
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006055url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006056 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6057 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006058 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006059
6060url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006061 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6062 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006063 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006064 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006065
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006066hdr <string>
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006067hdr(header) <string>
6068 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6069 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006070 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6071 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006072 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006073
6074 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006075 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006076 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6077
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006078 hdr(Connection) -i close
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01006079
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006080hdr_beg <string>
6081hdr_beg(header) <string>
6082 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006083 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6084 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01006085
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006086hdr_end <string>
6087hdr_end(header) <string>
6088 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006089 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6090 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006091
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006092hdr_sub <string>
6093hdr_sub(header) <string>
6094 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006095 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6096 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006097
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006098hdr_dir <string>
6099hdr_dir(header) <string>
6100 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6101 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6102 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006103 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6104 headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006105
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006106hdr_dom <string>
6107hdr_dom(header) <string>
6108 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6109 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6110 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006111 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6112 server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006113
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006114hdr_reg <regex>
6115hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6116 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6117 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6118 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006119 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6120 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006121
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006122hdr_val <integer>
6123hdr_val(header) <integer>
6124 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6125 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6126 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006127 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006128
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006129hdr_cnt <integer>
6130hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6131 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6132 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6133 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6134 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006135 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006136 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6137 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic8b16fc2008-02-18 01:26:35 +01006138
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02006139hdr_ip <ip_address>
6140hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6141 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6142 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006143 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6144 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02006145
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006146
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061477.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6148---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006149
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006150Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6151every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
6152order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
6153only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006154
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006155ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6156---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
6157TRUE always_true always match
6158FALSE always_false never match
6159LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006160HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006161HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6162HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
6163METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6164METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6165METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6166METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6167METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6168METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
6169HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006170HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006171HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6172HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006173RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006174REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
6175WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6176---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006177
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006178
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061797.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6180----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006181
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006182Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6183combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006184
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006185 - AND (implicit)
6186 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6187 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006188
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006189A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006190
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006191 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006192
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006193Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6194indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006195
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006196For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6197"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6198requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6199is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006200
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006201 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6202 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6203 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6204 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006205
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006206To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6207and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006208
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006209 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6210 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6211 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6212 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006213
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006214 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6215 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6216 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6217 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006218
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006219See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006220
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006221
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010062227.8. Pattern extraction
6223-----------------------
6224
6225The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6226response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6227for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6228
6229All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6230"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6231begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6232arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6233much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6234equivalent used in ACLs.
6235
6236The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6237
6238 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6239 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6240
6241 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6242 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6243 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6244 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6245
6246 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6247 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6248 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6249 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6250 type integer and only works with such tables.
6251
6252
6253The currently available list of transformations include :
6254
6255 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6256 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6257 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6258
6259 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6260 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6261 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6262
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006263 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6264 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6265 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6266 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6267 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6268
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006269
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062708. Logging
6271----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006272
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006273One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6274provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6275very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6276provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6277state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006278to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006279headers.
6280
6281In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6282about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6283send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6284
6285 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6286 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6287 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6288 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6289 at the termination.
6290
6291The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6292allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6293as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6294while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6295real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6296delay.
6297
6298
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062998.1. Log levels
6300---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006301
6302TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6303source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6304HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6305in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6306particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006307syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006308facilities.
6309
6310
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063118.2. Log formats
6312----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006313
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006314HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006315and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6316the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6317formats are the following ones :
6318
6319 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6320 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6321 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6322 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6323 extents.
6324
6325 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6326 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6327 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6328 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6329 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6330
6331 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6332 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6333 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6334 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6335 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6336
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006337 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6338 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6339 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6340 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6341
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006342Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6343specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6344field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6345servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6346always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6347identifier.
6348
6349Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6350 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6351 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6352 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6353 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6354
6355
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063568.2.1. Default log format
6357-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006358
6359This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6360as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6361format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6362
6363 Example :
6364 listen www
6365 mode http
6366 log global
6367 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6368
6369 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6370 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6371 (www/HTTP)
6372
6373 Field Format Extract from the example above
6374 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6375 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6376 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6377 4 'to' to
6378 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6379 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6380
6381Detailed fields description :
6382 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6383 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6384 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6385 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6386 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6387 and processed the connection.
6388 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6389
6390It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6391will eventually disappear.
6392
6393
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063948.2.2. TCP log format
6395---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006396
6397The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6398is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6399information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6400counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6401emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6402environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6403the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6404sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006405specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6406not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6407fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6408marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006409
6410 Example :
6411 frontend fnt
6412 mode tcp
6413 option tcplog
6414 log global
6415 default_backend bck
6416
6417 backend bck
6418 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6419
6420 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6421 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6422 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6423
6424 Field Format Extract from the example above
6425 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6426 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6427 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6428 4 frontend_name fnt
6429 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6430 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6431 7 bytes_read* 212
6432 8 termination_state --
6433 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6434 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6435
6436Detailed fields description :
6437 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6438 connection to haproxy.
6439
6440 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6441
6442 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6443 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6444 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6445 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6446
6447 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6448 and processed the connection.
6449
6450 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6451 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6452 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6453 applications.
6454
6455 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6456 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6457 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6458 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6459 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6460
6461 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6462 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6463 See "Timers" below for more details.
6464
6465 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6466 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6467 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6468 "Timers" below for more details.
6469
6470 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6471 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6472 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6473 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6474 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6475 details.
6476
6477 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6478 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6479 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6480 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6481 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6482
6483 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6484 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6485 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6486 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6487 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6488 for more details.
6489
6490 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6491 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6492 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6493 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6494 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006495 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006496
6497 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6498 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6499 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6500 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6501 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6502 caused by a denial of service attack.
6503
6504 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6505 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6506 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6507 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6508 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6509 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6510 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6511 denial of service attack.
6512
6513 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6514 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6515 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6516 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6517 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6518 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6519 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6520 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6521 be processed than on other servers.
6522
6523 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6524 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6525 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6526 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6527 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6528 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6529 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6530 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6531 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6532 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6533 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6534 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6535 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6536
6537 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6538 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6539 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6540 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6541 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6542 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6543 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6544 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6545
6546 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6547 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6548 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6549 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6550 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6551 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6552 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6553 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6554 occurs.
6555
6556
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065578.2.3. HTTP log format
6558----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006559
6560The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6561is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6562the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6563are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6564emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6565generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6566"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6567which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006568frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6569is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006570
6571Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6572slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6573with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6574
6575 Example :
6576 frontend http-in
6577 mode http
6578 option httplog
6579 log global
6580 default_backend bck
6581
6582 backend static
6583 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6584
6585 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6586 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6587 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006588 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006589
6590 Field Format Extract from the example above
6591 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6592 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6593 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6594 4 frontend_name http-in
6595 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6596 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6597 7 status_code 200
6598 8 bytes_read* 2750
6599 9 captured_request_cookie -
6600 10 captured_response_cookie -
6601 11 termination_state ----
6602 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6603 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6604 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6605 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6606 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006607
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006608
6609Detailed fields description :
6610 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6611 connection to haproxy.
6612
6613 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6614
6615 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6616 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6617 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6618 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6619 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6620
6621 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6622 and processed the connection.
6623
6624 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6625 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6626 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6627
6628 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6629 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6630 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6631 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6632 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6633 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6634
6635 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6636 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6637 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6638 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6639 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6640 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6641
6642 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6643 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6644 See "Timers" below for more details.
6645
6646 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6647 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6648 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6649 below for more details.
6650
6651 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6652 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6653 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6654 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6655 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6656 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6657 for more details.
6658
6659 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6660 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6661 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6662 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6663 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6664 details.
6665
6666 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6667 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6668 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6669
6670 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6671 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6672 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6673 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6674 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6675 overflowing.
6676
6677 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6678 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6679 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6680 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6681 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6682 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6683 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6684 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6685
6686 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6687 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6688 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
6689 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
6690 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
6691 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
6692 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
6693 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6694
6695 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6696 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6697 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
6698 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6699 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6700 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6701 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6702
6703 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6704 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6705 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6706 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6707 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006708 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006709 system.
6710
6711 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6712 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6713 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6714 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6715 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6716 caused by a denial of service attack.
6717
6718 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6719 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6720 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6721 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6722 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6723 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6724 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6725 denial of service attack.
6726
6727 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6728 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6729 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6730 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6731 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6732 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6733 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6734 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6735 processed than on other servers.
6736
6737 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6738 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6739 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6740 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6741 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6742 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6743 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6744 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6745 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6746 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6747 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6748 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6749 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6750
6751 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6752 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6753 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6754 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6755 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6756 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6757 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6758 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6759
6760 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6761 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6762 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6763 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6764 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6765 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6766 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6767 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6768 occurs.
6769
6770 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
6771 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
6772 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
6773 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
6774 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
6775 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
6776 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
6777 cookies" below for more details.
6778
6779 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
6780 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
6781 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
6782 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
6783 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
6784 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
6785 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
6786 and cookies" below for more details.
6787
6788 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
6789 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
6790 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
6791 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
6792 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
6793 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
6794 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
6795 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
6796
6797
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067988.3. Advanced logging options
6799-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006800
6801Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
6802just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
6803options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
6804for more information about their usage.
6805
6806
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068078.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
6808------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006809
6810It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
6811haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
6812commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
6813monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
6814ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
6815
6816 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
6817 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
6818 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
6819 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
6820
6821 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
6822 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
6823 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
6824 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
6825 such as other load-balancers.
6826
6827 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
6828 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
6829 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
6830
6831
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068328.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
6833----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006834
6835The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
6836what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
6837or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
6838"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
6839just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
6840log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
6841after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
6842is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
6843with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
6844with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
6845
6846
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068478.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
6848------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006849
6850Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
6851for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
6852"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
6853retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
6854raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
6855a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
6856file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
6857you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
6858"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
6859
6860
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068618.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
6862--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006863
6864Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
6865multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
6866them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
6867"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
6868logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
6869error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
6870and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
6871too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
6872useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
6873alternative.
6874
6875
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068768.4. Timing events
6877------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006878
6879Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
6880reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
6881the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
6882frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
6883mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
6884
6885 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
6886 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
6887 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
6888 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
6889 the client closes prematurely or times out.
6890
6891 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
6892 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
6893 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
6894 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
6895 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
6896
6897 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
6898 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
6899 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
6900 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
6901 connection never established.
6902
6903 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
6904 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
6905 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
6906 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
6907 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
6908 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
6909 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
6910 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
6911 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
6912 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
6913 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
6914
6915 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
6916 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
6917 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
6918 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
6919 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
6920
6921 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
6922
6923 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
6924 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
6925 negative.
6926
6927These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
6928protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
6929that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006930due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006931close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
6932session has been aborted on timeout.
6933
6934Most common cases :
6935
6936 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
6937 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
6938 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
6939 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
6940 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
6941 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
6942 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
6943 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
6944 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
6945 connections have been accepted at once.
6946
6947 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
6948 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
6949 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
6950 of ms on remote networks.
6951
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006952 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
6953 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
6954 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006955
6956 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
6957 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
6958 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
6959 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
6960 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
6961 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
6962 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
6963 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
6964 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
6965 to the server until another one is released.
6966
6967Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
6968
6969 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
6970 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
6971 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
6972
6973 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
6974 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
6975 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
6976
6977 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
6978 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
6979 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
6980 flags.
6981
6982 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
6983 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
6984 Check the session termination flags, then check the
6985 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
6986 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
6987 the client connection was maintained open.
6988
6989 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
6990 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
6991 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
6992 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
6993
6994
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069958.5. Session state at disconnection
6996-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006997
6998TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
6999"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
70002-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7001each of which has a special meaning :
7002
7003 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7004 session to terminate :
7005
7006 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7007
7008 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7009 server explicitly refused it.
7010
7011 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7012 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7013 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7014 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7015 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7016 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7017
7018 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7019 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7020 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7021 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7022 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7023
7024 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7025 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7026 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7027 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7028 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7029
7030 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7031 send or receive data.
7032
7033 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7034 send or receive data.
7035
7036 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7037 with nothing left in the buffers.
7038
7039 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7040
7041 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7042 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7043
7044 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7045 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7046 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7047 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7048 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7049
7050 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7051 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7052
7053 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7054 server (HTTP only).
7055
7056 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7057
7058 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7059 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7060 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7061
7062 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7063 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7064 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7065
7066 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7067
7068 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7069 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7070
7071 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7072 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7073 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7074
7075 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7076 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
7077 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
7078
7079 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7080 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7081 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7082 another server.
7083
7084 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7085 server.
7086
7087 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7088
7089 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7090 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7091
7092 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7093
7094 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7095 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7096 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7097
7098 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7099
7100 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7101 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7102
7103 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7104
7105 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7106
7107The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7108happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7109helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7110starvation, attacks, etc...
7111
7112The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7113alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7114easier finding and understanding.
7115
7116 Flags Reason
7117
7118 -- Normal termination.
7119
7120 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7121 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7122 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7123 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7124
7125 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7126 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7127 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7128 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7129 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7130 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007131
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007132 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7133 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7134 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7135
7136 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7137 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7138 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7139
7140 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7141 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7142 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7143 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7144 the server takes too long to respond.
7145
7146 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7147 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7148 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7149 long a time to respond.
7150
7151 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7152 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7153 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7154 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7155 and the client.
7156
7157 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7158 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7159 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7160 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7161 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7162 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7163
7164 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7165 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007166 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7167 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7168 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7169 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007170
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007171 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007172 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7173 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7174 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7175 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7176 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7177
7178 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7179 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7180 503 or 504 here.
7181
7182 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7183 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7184 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7185 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7186 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7187
7188 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7189 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007190 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007191 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7192 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7193
7194 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7195 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7196 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7197 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7198 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7199 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7200 between haproxy and the server.
7201
7202 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7203 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7204 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7205 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7206 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7207 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7208 solution is to fix the application.
7209
7210 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7211 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7212 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7213 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7214 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7215 external attacks.
7216
7217 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7218 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7219 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7220 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7221 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7222
7223 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7224 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7225 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7226 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7227 containing unauthorized characters.
7228
7229 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7230 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7231 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7232 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7233
7234 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7235 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7236 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7237 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7238
7239 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7240 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7241 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7242 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7243
7244
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072458.6. Non-printable characters
7246-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007247
7248In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7249consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7250converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7251prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7252being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7253escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7254is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7255'}' when logging headers.
7256
7257Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7258issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7259containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7260
7261Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7262the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7263performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7264
7265
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072668.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7267---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007268
7269Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7270achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007271section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007272cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7273the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7274the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007275locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007276not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7277user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7278a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7279wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7280
7281 Examples :
7282 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7283 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7284
7285 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7286 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7287
7288
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072898.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7290---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007291
7292Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7293proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7294the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7295server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7296
7297Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7298response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007299section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007300
7301It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007302time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7303appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007304are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7305and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7306follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7307request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7308in the logs.
7309
7310 Example :
7311 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7312 listen proxy-out
7313 mode http
7314 option httplog
7315 option logasap
7316 log global
7317 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7318
7319 # log the name of the virtual server
7320 capture request header Host len 20
7321
7322 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7323 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7324
7325 # log the beginning of the referrer
7326 capture request header Referer len 20
7327
7328 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7329 capture response header Server len 20
7330
7331 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7332 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7333
7334 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7335 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7336
7337 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7338 capture response header Via len 20
7339
7340 # log the URL location during a redirection
7341 capture response header Location len 20
7342
7343 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7344 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7345 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7346 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7347 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7348
7349 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7350 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7351 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7352 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007353 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007354
7355 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7356 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7357 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7358 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7359 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007360 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007361
7362
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073638.9. Examples of logs
7364---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007365
7366These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7367them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7368reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7369
7370 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7371 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7372 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7373
7374 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7375 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7376
7377 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7378 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7379 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7380
7381 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7382 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7383
7384 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7385 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7386 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7387
7388 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007389 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007390 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7391 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7392
7393 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7394 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7395 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7396
7397 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7398 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7399 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7400 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7401 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7402 to return the 502 and not the server.
7403
7404 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007405 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007406
7407 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7408 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7409 Nothing was sent to any server.
7410
7411 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7412 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7413
7414 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7415 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7416 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7417 send a 408 return code to the client.
7418
7419 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7420 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7421
7422 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7423 5 seconds ("c----").
7424
7425 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7426 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007427 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007428
7429 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007430 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007431 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7432 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7433 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7434 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7435 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007436
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007437
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074389. Statistics and monitoring
7439----------------------------
7440
7441It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7442mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7443CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7444Unix socket.
7445
7446
74479.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007448---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007449
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007450The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7451page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7452
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007453 0. pxname: proxy name
7454 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7455 for server)
7456 2. qcur: current queued requests
7457 3. qmax: max queued requests
7458 4. scur: current sessions
7459 5. smax: max sessions
7460 6. slim: sessions limit
7461 7. stot: total sessions
7462 8. bin: bytes in
7463 9. bout: bytes out
7464 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007465 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007466 12. ereq: request errors
7467 13. econ: connection errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007468 14. eresp: response errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007469 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7470 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
7471 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/...)
7472 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7473 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7474 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7475 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7476 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7477 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7478 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7479 25. qlimit: queue limit
7480 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7481 27. iid: unique proxy id
7482 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7483 29. throttle: warm up status
7484 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7485 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007486 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007487 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7488 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7489 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007490 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
7491 UNK -> unknown
7492 INI -> initializing
7493 SOCKERR -> socket error
7494 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7495 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7496 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example "Connection refused"
7497 (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7498 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7499 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007500 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007501 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7502 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7503 disable-on-404
7504 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007505 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007506 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
7507 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7508 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007509 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7510 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7511 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7512 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7513 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7514 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007515
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007516
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075179.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007518-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007519
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007520The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007521must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7522is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7523a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7524risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7525followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7526given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7527then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7528to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007529
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007530It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7531on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7532own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007533
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007534help
7535 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7536 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007537
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007538prompt
7539 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7540 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7541 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7542 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7543 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7544 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7545 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7546 command.
7547
7548quit
7549 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007550
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007551show errors [<iid>]
7552 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7553 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007554 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7555 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7556 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007557
7558 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7559 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7560 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7561 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7562 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7563 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7564 are reported too.
7565
7566 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7567 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7568 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7569 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7570 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7571 code.
7572
7573 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7574 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7575 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7576 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7577 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7578 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7579 line.
7580
7581 Example :
7582 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7583 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7584 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7585 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7586
7587 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7588 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7589 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7590 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7591 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7592 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7593 00204+ minal\r\n
7594 00211 \r\n
7595
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007596 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007597 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7598 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7599 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7600 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7601 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7602 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007603
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007604show info
7605 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7606
7607show sess
7608 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007609 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7610 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7611
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007612
7613show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
7614 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
7615 possible to dump only selected items :
7616 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
7617 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
7618 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
7619 for example:
7620 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
7621 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
7622 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
7623
7624 Example :
7625 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
7626 Name: HAProxy
7627 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
7628 Release_date: 2009/09/23
7629 Nbproc: 1
7630 Process_num: 1
7631 (...)
7632
7633 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
7634 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
7635 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
7636 (...)
7637 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
7638
7639 $
7640
7641 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
7642 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
7643 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
7644 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007645 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007646
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007647clear counters
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02007648 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7649 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7650 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007651 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7652 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02007653
7654clear counters all
7655 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007656 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7657 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7658
Cyril Bontécd19e512010-01-31 22:34:03 +01007659disable server <backend>/<server>
7660 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7661 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7662 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7663 during the maintenance.
7664
7665 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7666 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7667
7668 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7669 level "admin".
7670
7671enable server <backend>/<server>
7672 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7673 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7674
7675 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7676 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7677
7678 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7679 level "admin".
7680
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02007681get weight <backend>/<server>
7682 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7683 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7684 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02007685 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7686 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7687 dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02007688
Willy Tarreau7aabd112010-01-26 10:59:06 +01007689set timeout cli <delay>
7690 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7691 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7692 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7693
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02007694set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7695 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7696 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7697 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7698 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7699 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7700 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7701 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7702 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7703 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7704 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7705 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02007706 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7707 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7708 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02007709
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007710
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01007711/*
7712 * Local variables:
7713 * fill-column: 79
7714 * End:
7715 */